Canon PowerShot A3500 IS User guide

‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺳﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪©CANON INC. 2013‬‬ ‫‪CEL-ST7XA2N0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃ ًّﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺅﺳﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪CB-2LF/CB-2LFE‬‬ ‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪NB-11L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬ ‫‪WS-800‬‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻣﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪۹۹٫۹۹‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬ ‫‪*Solution Disk‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ(‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪Canon‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SD‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SDXC‬‬ ‫* ﺗﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺗﻧﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫́‬ ‫˼˺‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫̀‬ ‫˻‬ ‫˿ ˾ ˽ ˻ ˺‬ ‫˼‬ ‫́‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫̂‬ ‫˽‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫˹˺‬ ‫˾‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫˺˺‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫˼‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫˺‬ ‫˻˺‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫˺˺‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪) i> :‬ﻣﻘﺭّ ﺏ(< ‪/‬‬ ‫>‪) j‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(<‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) k> :‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ(< ‪/‬‬ ‫>‪) g‬ﻓﻬﺭﺱ(<‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬ ‫˹˺‬ ‫˻˺‬ ‫˿‬ ‫̀‬ ‫̂‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫=‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‪.‬‬ ‫ُﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) 1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(<‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﺯﺭ > )ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ(<‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪FUNC. / SET‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(< ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) h‬ﻭﻣﻳﺽ(< ‪ /‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬ ‫> )ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ / <(Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ ١١‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪) l‬ﻋﺭﺽ(< ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬ ‫< ‪ /‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬ ‫‪ ١٢‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<n‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪ <o‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫>‪ <q‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫>‪ <r‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫>‪ <p‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ‪ ١١‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪۲......................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ‪۲............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ‪۲........‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪۳........................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ‪٤....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪٥.............‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ‪٦...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪٦۸ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۰ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۱ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۳ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪۷٤ ..............................‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۳۱ ...................... (Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ‪۳٥ ........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۳۹ ........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ‪٤۱ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪٤۱ .........................‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۲٤...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪۲٥ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪۲٦ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲٦ .........................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۷ ....................................FUNC.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۸ ...................................MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۲۹ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪٤۲.....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪٤۹..................................... P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪٥۰ .......... ([P‬‬ ‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٥۰ ......‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪٥۳ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪٥٤ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٥۹ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪٦۱ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪٦۱ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪۲٤ ..................................‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٦٤................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪٦٥ .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪٦۷ .....................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۷۷.............................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۷۸ ........... Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۷۹ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ( ‪۷۹ .....‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪۸۰ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‪۸۱ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ( ‪۸۱ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۸۲ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۸٥ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۸۷ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۸۸ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪۹٤ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹٥ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪۹۷ ......... CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۹۸ .....‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪۹۹ ...............‬‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪٤۳ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٤٤ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪٤۷ ....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪۹ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱۰ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪۱٤ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱۸ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪۲۲ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪۳۰.................... Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪۱۰۲..............................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۰۳ ................‬‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۰۹..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۰ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۱۱ ....................‬‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۱۳ ...................................‬‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ‪۱۲۱....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۲۲ ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱۲٥ ................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ‪۱۲۷ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱۲۸ .............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪۱۳۰ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪۱۳٦ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪۱۳۹ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪٥٥ ،٤۳ ،۳۱............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪۳۱ .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪۳۸ ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪٤۷ ،۳٦ ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۳۸ .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ‪٤٤ ............................................‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﻭﺝ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪٦٥ ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‪٦۹ ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۱۱۱.......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۹ ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٦۷ ................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۱ ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤۳‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۳۱ .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪٦٥ ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۱۳............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤٦‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬ ‫)= ‪(٤۷‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻅ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪۲۱ ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪۸٥ ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ‪۸۲ ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۹۷ ........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻝ ﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬ ‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻬﺏ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺳﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻥ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﱠ ﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻐﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ )ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻗﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‪۱۰ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪۱٤ .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪۱۸ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪۲۲ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫˺‬ ‫˻‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ) (‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫˺‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) ( ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ ) (‪.‬‬ ‫˻‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫˺‬ ‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫˻‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺻﻣﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CB-2LF‬‬ ‫‪CB-2LFE‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫˺‬ ‫˻‬ ‫‪۱۰‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :CB-2LF‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ) ( ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ) (‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :CB-2LFE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ) ( ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۰٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ ) (‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ )ﻷﺳﻔﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ ) (‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۳‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<o><p‬‬ ‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ = ‪ ۱۲‬ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼ‪ ،(۱۱۰ = ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ (۱۲‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪۱٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱٥‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪) <i‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪) <j‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬ ‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<o><p‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<r‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬ ‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[a‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۷۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۷‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﻔﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<r‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺭﺡ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ( )= ‪،(۲‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )ﻳﺳﺗﺛﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ISP‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪PDF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ PDF‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪http://www.canon.com/icpd‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﻔﻬﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﻣ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫‪Windows 8‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‬ ‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista SP2‬‬ ‫‪Windows XP SP3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ( ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ۱٫٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ۱٫۸۳‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core 2 Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ۱٫٦٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪) Windows 8‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺕ(‪،‬‬ ‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺕ(‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫‪:Mac OS X 10.7 – 10.8‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪) Windows 8‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۳۲‬ﺑﺕ(‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫)‪(RAM‬‬ ‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۳۲‬ﺑﺕ(‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ۱ :Mac OS X 10.6‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫‪ ۱ :Windows Vista‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫‪ ٥۱۲ :Windows XP‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ ۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪ ٥٥۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ*‬ ‫‪ ٤٤۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ*‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ۷٦۸ × ۱،۰۲٤‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪Mac OS X 10.6‬‬ ‫‪Mac OS X 10.7‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫‪*Mac OS X 10.8‬‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ Mac OS X 10.6.8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Mac OS X 10.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Mac OS X 10.8.2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ ۲‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Apple‬‬ ‫*‪ ۳‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ‪ ۱۰۰) Silverlight 5.1‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪Microsoft .NET‬‬ ‫‪ Framework 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ )ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ٥۰۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ .Windows XP‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۹‬‬ ‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.6‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﺣﺗﺎﺟﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ )= ‪(۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )ﻗﺭﺹ ‪(۲ =) (DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬ ‫‪ (۲ =) (CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) (‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ) (‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲۰‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ‬ ‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ImageBrowser EX‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫˺‬ ‫˻‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲۱‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.6‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (۲۰‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬ ‫‪/Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Canon‬‬ ‫‪ ،[CameraWindow‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪CameraWindow‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬ ‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬ ‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺑﺩء ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Downloads Images‬‬ ‫‪/From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪Canon‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ [Canon CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄ ]‪◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬ ‫]‪.[CameraWindow] ◄ [CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬ ‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪) Dock‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ؛ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬ ‫‪CAMERA Solution‬‬ ‫‪Disk‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪CB-2LF/‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪*CB-2LFE‬‬ ‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪*NB-11L‬‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪*IFC-400PCU‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫‪Windows/‬‬ ‫‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪AVC-DC400 (AV‬‬ ‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫‪*HF-DC2‬‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ High-Power Flash HF-DC1 ۲‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲۲‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬ ‫‪WS-800‬‬ ‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬ ‫‪ACK-DC90‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲۳‬‬ ‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﻕ ﻟﻙ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲٤‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻲ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻳﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪۲٥ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪۲٦ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲٦ .......................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۷ ................................ FUNC.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۸ ............................... MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪۲۹ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻛﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ )= ‪.(۱۰٦‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪.(۲۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋ ًﻳﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪) .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(٦٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۱۳۲ – ۱۳۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲۷‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<r‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<r‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<q‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ]‪ ،[4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‪ ،[1‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )=‪.(۱۳٥ – ۱۳۳‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <r‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬ ‫‪۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲۹‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (۳‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪ (۲۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(۱۰٦ ،٦۱ ،۳۹ ،۲٥‬‬ ‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪ (٤۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۳۰‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۳۱ .................. (Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪۳٥ .....................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۳۹ ......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ‪٤۱ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪٤۱ ......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪) <i‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪) <j‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۳۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(۳٤ ،۳۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۳‬‬ ‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺟﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۳۲‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺩﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ]‪ [h‬ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ )=‪.(٦۳‬‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ*‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ*‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻣﺎء‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺣﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻏﺭﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺗﻡ‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ ۲‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ (٤۹ =) [G‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۳٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ )‪(Hybrid IS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭ )ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ(‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ(‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ( ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ (٤۹ =) [G‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭ ًﺑﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۳٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪.<i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻣﻛﻥ )ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻪ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪<i‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺩ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٥٦۰ – ۲۸‬ﻣﻡ )‪ ۱٤۰ – ۲۸‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۳٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]][ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]][‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺗﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[$‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪،(۳٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[$‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(۳٦‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ][[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ][[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(۳٦‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ[ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[$‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(۳٦‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ[ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ[ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]![‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ (.‬ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺟﺏ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ )= ‪.(۱۲‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪(۱۱۳‬‬‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ؛ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺿﻲ ﻋﺷﺭ‬ ‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫[‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪ ٥۹٤ x ٤۲۰) A2‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫‪٤۲۰ x ۲۹۷) A5 – A3‬‬ ‫– ‪ ۲۱۰ x ۱٤۸‬ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪۳۹‬‬ ‫] [‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫] [‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪.16:9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٤۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﻥ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪[.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[R‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺳﺎءﺓ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻳﻭﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪1280 x 720‬‬ ‫‪ ۲٥‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪(HD‬‬ ‫‪640 x 480‬‬ ‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻳﻧﻬﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٤۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺷﺧﺹ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ ،[$‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﻋﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻅ[‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ )= ‪.(٦۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [4‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.(۲۸ =) “MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ[‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٤۲‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺳﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٤۳ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٤٤ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪٤۷ ..................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬ ‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺟﻳﺔ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﻁﻭﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ ،[t‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫‪٤۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫[ ﻫﻲ ]‬ ‫[ )‪ (2304 x 1728‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٤۳‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ(‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻔﻭ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ(‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤٤‬‬ ‫[ ﻭ]‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ(‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﱢ ﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺷﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<p‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٤٦‬‬ ‫ُﻋﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬ ‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻭﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫• ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<o><p‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ] [‬ ‫)= ‪ .(۳۹‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ]‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪٤۷‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ .(٥٥‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺟﺯﺋ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺿﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺿﻣﺎﻣﻙ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ (٤۱‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ(‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[N‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[N‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ])[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ۱٫۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]![ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬ ‫‪٤۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٤۹‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‬ ‫• ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪.[G‬‬ ‫• ]‪ :[G‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ]‪ ،[G‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ )= ‪.(۱۳٤ – ۱۳۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪٥۰ .......([P‬‬ ‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٥۰ ....‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪٥۳ ......................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪٥٤ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥۹ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‪٦۱ ....................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪٦۱ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([P‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٥۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪.[G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪،(٤۳‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[G‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‬ ‫)= ‪ ،(٦۳ – ٥۰‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (٥۲ =) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،(٥۹ = ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ [G‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫>‪ <H‬ﻭ>‪ <n‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ ،[G‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۱/۳‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [#‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﱠﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]&[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪ ۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<r‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]&[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫]&[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩًﺍ ﺿﻣﻥ ]‬ ‫[ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،(AE‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪٥۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]@[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﻗﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﻳﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ )‪ (tungsten‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ‬ ‫‪Tungsten‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻱ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ(‬ ‫‪Fluorescent‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ‬ ‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬ ‫‪٥۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ“‬ ‫)= ‪ (٥۳‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٥٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.(۲۷ =) [W‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[e‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪.(۲۷ =) [e‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[e‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪ (۳٦‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪.(٤۱‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫[ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ]‪ [e‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ][[‬ ‫)= ‪.(۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ )ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[u‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪.(۲۷ =) [u‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[u‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٥٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪AiAF‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ( ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬ ‫)] [ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٥٦‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٥۷‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺧﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻲء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪(٥٥=) “AF‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‬ ‫ﺫﻱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ )= ‪ (٥۷‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﻁﺎﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[4‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ]‪ [e‬ﻭ]‪.[u‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺛﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٥۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪.(٦۲ =) AF‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪.AF‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[4‬‬ ‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٥۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺟﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<q‬‬ ‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[%‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫]‪ [%‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٥۹‬‬ ‫] [ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [h‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“‬ ‫)= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫]‪ [Z‬ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﻲء‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬ ‫]![ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪FE‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪ ۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٥۹ =) [h‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٥۱ =) AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٦۰‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<r‬‬ ‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]([‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫]([ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ*‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ( )= ‪.(۳٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٦۱‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<q‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬ ‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ؛ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺿﻲ ﻋﺷﺭ‬ ‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻁﻭﻁ[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ ،(۳٥‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﻳﻛﺑﱢﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪[AF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻛﺑﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻭﻋﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۳٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪.(٥٦ =) AF‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪٦۳‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.(۲۸ =) <m‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 4 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻅ[ )=‪.(٦۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ )= ‪ (٦۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ .[4‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٦٤‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻭﺗﺻﻔﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ‬ ‫• ﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٦٥ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪٦۷ ..................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪٦۸ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۰ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۱ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۳ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۷٤ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬ ‫>‪ ،<o><p‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻔﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<r‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ، [1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬ ‫‪٦٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( ﻫﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ .(۹۸‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ )‪) (UTC‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [---‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪) Coordinated Universal Time :UTC‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﱠﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺟﺭﻳﻧﺗﺵ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪٦۷‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۷۰‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ )= ‪ (۷۱‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪ <g‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬ ‫>‪ .<k‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٦۸‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪” (۳‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪،(٦۷‬‬ ‫ﻭ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(٦۸‬ﻭ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪ .(٦۹‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۷۰‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۷۲‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪“(DPOF‬‬ ‫)= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ ،(۷٦ – ۷٤‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪ <k‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫[‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ >‪.<g‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫>‪.<o><q><r‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٦۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ[‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [.‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺑﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۲٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ .<q><r‬ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ ،(٦۷‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌَ ﺭَ ﺿﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۷۲ ،۷۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [:‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪ .(۲۷‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻣﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [:‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [1‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۷۰‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰٥ ،۱۰٤‬‬ ‫‪۷۰‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۷۰‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۷۱‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [a‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪۷۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪.[ ] (۷۰‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬ ‫)= ‪ ،(۷۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]\[‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۷۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]\[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۷٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻛﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۷٦ – ۷٤‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۷٤‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۷۳‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [1‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ]‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﺋﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬ ‫[ )= ‪ (۳۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻛـ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [1‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫[ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[‪،‬‬ ‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪۷٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [1‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۷٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(٦۸‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۷۷‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪۷۸ ....... Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۷۹ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‪۷۹ .....‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪۸۰ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ‪۸۱ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪۸۱ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪۸۲ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪۸٥ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۸۷ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۸۸ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪۹٤ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹٥ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪۹۷ .... CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۹۸ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۹۹ ...........‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۷۸‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ *Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺻﺩ ًﻗﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫®‬ ‫* ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬ ‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﻥ ﻳﺷﺗﺭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻛﻌﺿﻭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪CANON‬‬ ‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻻً ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪(DPS over IP‬‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪*(۱۹‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۷۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬ ‫‪(۸۲ =) GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(۸٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪(۹٥‬‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪*(۹٤‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫)=‪(۸۲‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫)=‪(۸٥‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫)=‪(۸۷‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫)=‪(۸۸‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫)=‪(۹٤‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪*O‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪(۹۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬ ‫*‪ ۲‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ )= ‪.(۹۷‬‬ ‫*‪ ۳‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻫﻭ ‪ PC1898‬ﺃﻭ ‪) PC1953‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ WLAN‬ﻭﻫﻭ ‪ .(WM219‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺩﺉ ﺑـ ‪.PC‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪WLAN‬‬ ‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺎﺏ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ ﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ ،WLAN‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻘﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫• ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﺍﺗﻳﺟﻳﺔ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺩ ﻣﻔﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ -‬ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻛﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸۰‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺑﺙ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Complies with‬‬ ‫‪IDA Standards‬‬ ‫‪DB00671‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗِﺑﻝ ‪.IDA Singapore‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺻﺭﺍﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺫﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳُﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺻﻭﻻً ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺗﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻧﺗﺣﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﻫﺟﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻁﻼﻕ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺗﻙ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸۱‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺭﺡ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺷﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳُﺭَ ﺣﱢ ﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫• ﺟﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻳﺣﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻳﺭﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻬﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪SSID/ESSID‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺣﺭﻑ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻭ ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ُﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑـ‬ ‫”ﺍﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺿﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ‪ -‬ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ‪ - DPS over IP‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬ ‫ﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳ ًﻣﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<m‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸۲‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬ ‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<o‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻭﻻً‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ )= ‪ .(۱۹‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ“ )= ‪ (۱۹‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬ ‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )‪.(http://canon.com/cig‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻙ ﻋﺿﻭ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON‬‬ ‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪،http://canon.com/cig‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ )ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺗﻼﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ‬ ‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ‪.(۲۱ =) CameraWindow‬‬ ‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸۳‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Finish‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻹﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ )= ‪ .(۸۹‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Camera Settings‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Set Up Web Services‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬ ‫‪.GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﺗﻙ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ‬ ‫]‪/Login‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪/Camera‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪ [o‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [p‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪/Camera‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸٤‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻭﻓﺭﻱ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪CANON‬‬ ‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ )‪،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ( ﻭﺷﺭﻭﻁﻪ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ُﺗﻔﺭَ ﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۰‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،WPS‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۹۲‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٥‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۷‬ﻭﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Edit Web Services‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ .(۹٥‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ[ )= ‪.(۹۷‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۰‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<o><p‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪،<q><r‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<n‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۹۲‬‬ ‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPad‬ﺃﻭ ‪،iPod touch‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪Mac‬‬ ‫‪ App Store‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،Android‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬ ‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪ Google Play‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛ ًﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۸٥‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺿﻣﱠﻧﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪Canon‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪۸٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛ ًﻳﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )= ‪ ،(۸٥‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )=‪.(۹۰‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۷‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۷‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۹۸‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<o><p‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪،<q><r‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<n‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻫﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<o><p‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ ،<q><r‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸۸‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ (CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ“‬ ‫)= ‪.(۱۹‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.(۱۹ =) CameraWindow‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﻳﻥ ‪ Windows 7 Starter‬ﻭ‪.Home Basic‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻧﻅﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪) Windows 7 N‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ( ﻭ‪) KN‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻭﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺑﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Media Feature Pack‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬ ‫ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ(‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫○ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫○ ‪) WEP‬ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ(‬ ‫○ )‪WPA-PSK (TKIP‬‬ ‫○ )‪WPA-PSK (AES‬‬ ‫○ )‪WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬‬ ‫○ )‪WPA2-PSK (AES‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻝ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ WEP‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫○‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.“Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫• ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬ ‫]‪ [3‬ﻭ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻡ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۸۹‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬ ‫]‪◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬ ‫]‪/Wi-Fi connection setup‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺩﻓﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪) ICMP‬ﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ )‪.Universal Plug & Play (UPnP‬‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻲ )‪ (WPS‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،WPS‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۹۲‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺿﻔﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ WPS‬ﻣﺯﻳﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ ﻟـ ‪.WPS‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪،[PBC‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪۹۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪،[WPS‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﺛﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺑﺿﻊ ٍ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹۱‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۰‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ Windows‬ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻭﻕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪/Start‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Control‬‬ ‫‪/Panel‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add a device‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۳‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻛﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٥‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<o><p‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪،<q><r‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<n‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۷‬ﻭ‪۸‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ = ‪ .۹۱‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“‬ ‫)= ‪.(۹۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﻋﺭﺽ ]*[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ (CameraWindow‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬ ‫‪Images From Canon Camera using‬‬ ‫‪/Canon CameraWindow‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.[Canon CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹۳‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬ ‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ‬ ‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ‪.Dock‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪ (۱۸‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹٤‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۹۲‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“‬ ‫)= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹٥‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۰‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<o><p‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪،<q><r‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<n‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪CANON‬‬ ‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬ ‫‪.GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٥۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ (CameraWindow‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫)= ‪.(۹۳‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹٦‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<n‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ( ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫>‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]] [ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺩﻗﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ )ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﻭﺯ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹۷‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ(“ )= ‪ (۸۱‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪(۹٥‬‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬ ‫‪GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹۸‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ“‬ ‫)= ‪ (۸٤‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪CANON‬‬ ‫‪ ،iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪،‬‬ ‫= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪CameraWindow‬‬ ‫)= ‪ (۸٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ (.(۱۲‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۷‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۸٦‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹۹‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ )ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺭﺡ ﻟﻺﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬ ‫]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ )= ‪(۱۰۰‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪(۸٦‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ )= ‪(۱۰۰‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪ : O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ – ‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“ )= ‪،(۹۹‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۸۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۲۸ =) [3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰۰‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“ )= ‪،(۹۹‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰۱‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬ ‫‪ ،(۹۷ =) “iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰۲‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۰۳ .............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ .[3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ .(٦٥‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬ ‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ (.[3‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪<p‬‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<o><p‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﻠﻥ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )‪ (9999 – 0001‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ٍ‬ ‫ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲،۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۰٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<o><p‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪(۱۰٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۰٤‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪0001‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.((۱۰٤‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪ (۱۸‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫)= ‪ .(۲٥‬ﻭﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻳﻭﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ (٦٦‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‪/‬ﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺩﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[ft/in‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬ ‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ )= ‪.(۲٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (٦۱ ،۳۹‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫‪۱۰٦‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۱۲‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰۷‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ>‪.<n‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪،‬‬ ‫[ )= ‪ (۱۳‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] [3‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ (۱۲‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬‫)= ‪ (۱۰۷‬ﻭ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪(۱۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰۸‬‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫• ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۷۷ =) [Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫• ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪(۱۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ )= ‪(٥۳‬‬‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۷۷ =) Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫[ )= ‪ (۱٤‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۰۹‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﻋﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۰ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۱۱ ................‬‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۱۳ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۱۰‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC2‬‬ ‫ﻫﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.High-Power Flash HF-DC1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LF/CB-2LFE‬‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪AVC-DC400 (AV‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﺭﻳﺢ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻣﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺣﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ‪ CB-2LD‬ﻭ‪ CB-2LDE‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC90‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬ ‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣ ﱢﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪) AVC-DC400 (AV‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۱۲۹‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪ ۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (PAL‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪ ۲‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‬ ‫)= ‪ (۱۱‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺢ‬ ‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺛﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.((۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۱۲‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ ) (‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC ACK-DC90‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻐﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[c‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪ ۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬ ‫‪۱۱۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫‪۱۱٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪(۱۱۳‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ(‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬ ‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱‬‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪(۱۱٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫>‪.<o><q><r‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬ ‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱۱۳‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻁﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪۱۱٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪<q><r‬‬ ‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪(۱۱٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳ ًﻁﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ‪.L‬‬ ‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۱۱٦‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪،<q><r‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۱٥‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬ ‫)= ‪ (۱۱۳‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ(“‬ ‫)= ‪ (۱۱٤‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯﻳﻥ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ُ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (۱۱۹‬ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪.(DPOF) Digital Print Order Format‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ .[2‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎء ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫‪۱۱۷‬‬ ‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫–‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺭﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ٍ‬ ‫• ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.(۱۲ =) <n‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫‪۱۱۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬ ‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۸‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۹۹‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬ ‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۸‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۱۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪،(۱۱۸ – ۱۱۷‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪ (۱۱۹‬ﻭﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬ ‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬ ‫]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۲۰‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <m‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬ ‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱۹‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۲۱‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۲۲ ...............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱۲٥ ............‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ‪۱۲۷ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۲۸ .........‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪۱۳۰ ....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪۱۳٦ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺅ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۱‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻼً ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺕ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ُﺗﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻠﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻔﺧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۱۱۱‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫[ )= ‪ .(۱۲‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۱۳٤‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬ ‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ]‪ [h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٥۹ =) [h‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٥۲ =) ISO‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬ ‫]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(٤۱‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ‪.macro‬‬ ‫• ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪.(٥۸ ،٥۷ =) AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )=‪ ،(۱٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )=‪.(۲٦‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬ ‫‪۱۲۲‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٥۰‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪“FUNC.‬‬ ‫ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۳٤ – ۱۳۰‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٥۹ =) [h‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۷٥ ،٥۲‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬ ‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]![ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٥۰‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٥۲ =) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳۷ ،۱۰٤‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬ ‫[ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺃﺣﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(٤۰‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]![ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬ ‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫[ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻛﺎﺱ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٥۲ =) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٥۲‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬ ‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄ ﱡﺛﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(٤۰‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ (٤۱‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪ (۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ؛ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺭﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(۷٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬ ‫‪۱۲۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪ (٦٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۳‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۹۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۲٤‬‬ ‫[ )= ‪ (٤٥‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۲٥‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻭ>‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<m‬‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪.(۸۲ =) CameraWindow‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻛﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )= ‪.(۸۹ ،۸۸‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪/.‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻁﻭﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۹٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺟﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬ ‫)= ‪.(۱۱‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱،۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻘﻁﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻠﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(۱۰۰ =) Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ!‬ ‫• ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۰٥‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪،(۱۱‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (٤۹ ،٤۲ ،۳۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۷٦ – ۷٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۷۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۰‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺣﻣﻲ! )= ‪(۷۰‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪/MOV‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪MP4‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۲٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۲٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺋﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ )*( ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ* )= ‪ (٦۸‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۷۳‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ* )= ‪ (۷٦ – ۷٤‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ* )= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ*‬ ‫)= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱۱۳‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۱۱۹‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ ۱،۰۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪،[3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰٤‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(۱۱٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺻﺣﻳﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻡ ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫• ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺗﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪Canon‬‬ ‫ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻛﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬ ‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﻣﺯﻳﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻣﺎ )= ‪ (۹۷‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ‪ SSL‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۲۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻗﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬ ‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺛﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﻳﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪٢٦‬‬ ‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬ ‫]ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪۱۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪٢٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ ‫)=‪(۳۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬ ‫‪٢٧‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(۳٤ =) IS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۰‬‬ ‫‪٢٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۰۷‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪(۱۲۸‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٥۳‬‬ ‫‪Drive mode‬‬ ‫)= ‪(٥٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫)= ‪(٦۱ ،۳۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(۳٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫)= ‪(۳۳‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪(۳۹‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬ ‫)= ‪(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ )= ‪(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬ ‫)= ‪(۳٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪(٥٥ =) AF‬‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )=‪،٥٤‬‬ ‫‪ ،(٥٥‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(٥۸=) AF‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪،(۱۳۰‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )= ‪(۳۳‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(٥۹ ،۳۸‬‬ ‫‪١٧‬‬ ‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫‪١٩‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢١‬‬ ‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫‪٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬ ‫)= ‪(٤۰‬‬ ‫ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪(۳۸‬‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٥۲ =) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٥۲‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪،(٥۱ =) AE‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(٦۰ =) FE‬‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ – ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻭﻗﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ – ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۱۱۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ* )ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬ ‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* )ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪۱۲۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (٦٥ ،۳۱‬ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪(GPS‬‬ ‫)= ‪(٦٦‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۳۰‬‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪،(٥۲=) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )=‪(٤٦‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٥۳‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫)= ‪(۷٦ – ۷٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪،(٤۰ ،۳۹‬‬ ‫‪) MOV‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫)= ‪(۹۷‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫‪١٧‬‬ ‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫‪١٩‬‬ ‫)= ‪(۱۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ – ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫)= ‪(۱۰٥‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ‪ ،‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )= ‪(٤۰‬‬ ‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(٥٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫)= ‪(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫)= ‪(۱۳۷‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢١‬‬ ‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬ ‫)= ‪(۷٦ ،٤۰‬‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(۷٥ ،٥۲‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫)= ‪(۱۲‬‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.(۱۱۳ =) PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ >‪.<q><r‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫!‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(٥۹ ،۳۸‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۳۰‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪/AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪*(٦۰ ،٥۱ =) FE‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(٥۸ =) AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪(٦۱ ،۳۹‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪(۲٦‬‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Z‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ ۲‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ]![‪.‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪۱۳۱‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٥۲ =) ISO‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫][‪$‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ*‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ*‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٥۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪(٥٤ =) Drive Mode‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(۳٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(۳۷‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻏﺎﻣﻕ ‪ -‬ﻓﺎﺗﺢ[‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ ۲‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ ۳‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )= ‪(۳۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۳۲‬‬ ‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(٥٥ ،٥٤‬‬ ‫‪eu‬‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﻟﻠﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻁﺎﺭ‪(٥٥ =) AF‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ*‬ ‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(٦۲ =) AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪(٥۷‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪(٥۸‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪(٤۰ =) .‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٥۲‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(٦۳‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ۲/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ٤/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ۸/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪] ۲‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۳۳‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۳٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(٦۰ =) IS‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‬ ‫)= ‪(۳۸‬‬ ‫ﻁﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۳٥‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰٥ ،۱۰٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰٥‬‬ ‫ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰٦ ،۲٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫= ‪۱۲‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰۷‬‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬ ‫= ‪۱۱۱‬‬ ‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫= ‪۷۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫= ‪۱۱۸‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫= ‪۱۱۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫= ‪۱۱۸‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫= ‪۱۱۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰۷‬‬ ‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫= ‪۷۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬ ‫= ‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫= ‪۱٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫= ‪۷۰‬‬ ‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫= ‪٦۷‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬ ‫= ‪۱۰٤‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬ ‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫= ‪۷۱‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫= ‪٦۹‬‬ ‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫= ‪۱۱۳‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫= ‪٦۹‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬ ‫= ‪۷٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ‬ ‫= ‪۷۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬ ‫= ‪۷٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫= ‪۷۰‬‬ ‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫= ‪۷٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫= ‪۷۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬ ‫= ‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫= ‪۱۱۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫= ‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫= ‪۷٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ(‬ ‫‪ ۱٦‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪) 5.0 :٥x‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( – ‪) 25.0‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ‪mm‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪) 28 :‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( – ‪) 140‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ‪(mm‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD TFT‬ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۷٫٥‬ﺳﻡ )‪ ۳٫۰‬ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ۲۳۰،۰۰۰ :‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬ ‫‪ ،Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪) DPOF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪Exif 2.3 (JPEG) :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MOV :‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪H.264 :‬؛ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪) Linear PCM :‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ((‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫‪Hi-speed USB‬‬ ‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪*IEEE802.11b/g/n‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۳٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ )‪OFDM (IEEE 802.11g/n‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ )‪DSSS (IEEE 802.11b‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ*‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫* ﺩﻋﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬ ‫ﻗﻧﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ (PC1953) ۱۱ – ۱‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PC1898) ۱۳ – ۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ )= ‪(۷۹‬‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪،WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP) ،WEP‬‬ ‫)‪WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP‬‬ ‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬ ‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC90‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪(CIPA‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۹٫۸ × ٥٦٫۰ × ۹۷٫۷‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪(CIPA‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۳٥‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪ ۱۲۰‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬ ‫‪ ۲۰۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ*‬ ‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ*‬ ‫‪ ۲٦٥‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۲۰‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫*‪ ۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺄﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ( ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging Products‬‬ ‫)‪.Association (CIPA‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ۳۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬ ‫‪ ۸‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪Pixels‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪16M/4608x3456‬‬ ‫‪1903‬‬ ‫‪7684‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪(۱‬‬ ‫‪8M/3264x2448‬‬ ‫‪3721‬‬ ‫‪15020‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪(۲‬‬ ‫‪2M/1600x1200‬‬ ‫‪12927‬‬ ‫‪52176‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬ ‫‪ ۲٫۰ – ۱٫۲‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫)ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬ ‫‪40937‬‬ ‫‪165225‬‬ ‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ(‬ ‫‪4608x2592‬‬ ‫‪2531‬‬ ‫‪10219‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ (j‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬ ‫‪ ۳‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪ ۱٫۲‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪ ۱٫۲‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪*e‬‬ ‫‪ ٥۰ – ۳‬ﺳﻡ‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪*u‬‬ ‫‪ ۳‬ﻡ – ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ۳‬ﻡ – ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫* ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ۸‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ ۰٫۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫‪ ۲٫۹‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫‪ ۳۲‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٤۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ۳‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ۱۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ۲۸‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ٥۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۰٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۳۷‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪(j‬‬ ‫‪ ٥۰‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۳٫۰‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1 – 1/2000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪ 15 – 1/2000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪) f/2.8 / f/7.9‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪) f/6.9 / f/20 ،‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۳۸‬‬ ‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬ ‫‪ ۳٫٦‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬ ‫‪ ٦۸۰‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ ۳۰۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٤۰ – ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٥٫۲ × ٤۰٫۲ × ۳٤٫٦‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪ ۱۳‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LF/CB-2LFE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬ ‫‪ ۸٫۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ ۰٫۰۷ ،‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ( – ‪ ۰٫۰٤‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‬ ‫‪ ٤٫۲‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ ۰٫٤۱ /‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(NB-11L‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ )ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺅﺷﺭﻳﻥ(‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪ ٤۰ – ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺷﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱۳۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪٥٥ ...........................(AF‬‬ ‫‪CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۹۳ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۸٥ ...........................................‬‬ ‫‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۸۲ ..............................................‬‬ ‫‪۱۱۷ ................................................. DPOF‬‬ ‫‪٥٤ ........................................... Drive mode‬‬ ‫‪) Macro‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪٥٤ ...................................‬‬ ‫‪۱۱۳ ،۱۱۰ ................................... PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪) P‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٥۰ .........................................‬‬ ‫‪۷۸ ..................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۸۸ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۸۸ .......................................‬‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۸۹ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ‪۹۳ ..................... CameraWindow‬‬ ‫‪WPS‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪۹۰ ........................................PBC‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪۹۱ ......................................... PIN‬‬ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤۳ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹٥ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ ‪۹٥ ........‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤۳ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻫﺩﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۸۷ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۹۰ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۸۲ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪۹٤ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۸٥ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٥٥ ............................................... AF‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱۰۰ .....................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱۰۸ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۱۹ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٤۸ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۲۲ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‪۱۰۳ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪٤۰ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۳۷ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۸٤ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪۱۰۰ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۸۱ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪۱۹ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۲۱ ...................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬ ‫‪۲ .................................... Solution Disk‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱۰ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪۱۲۸ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‪٦۱ ،۳۹ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲٥ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۷٥ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۷٦ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷٤ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤٤ .............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٥٥ .........................................AF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪٥۷ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪٦۲ ..................................... AF‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٥۸ ..............................................AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱۲۸ .................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪٥٤ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ‪٤۱ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪۳٥ ،۳۱ ،۱٥ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪۳٥ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۰۷ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۳۹ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱۰ ،۲ ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۰۷ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪۱۲۹ ،۱۲۸ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱٤ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۷۱ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪۷۰ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪٦۳ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۲ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱۱۳ ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱٦ .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪٦۷ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۱۱۱ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪٦۷ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪٦۹ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۱٦ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪٦۸ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۳۸ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﻲء‪٥۹ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪٥۹ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱۳۰ .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۲۸ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻫﺩﻑ‪۸۷ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‪۱۰۸ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪۸۱ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪٥۳ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۲۹ .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪۷۲ ،۷۱ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪۱۱۰ ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪۳٦ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪۳۷ ............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٤۷ ..................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪۳۷ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪۳۱ ،۱٤ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪۱۱۳ ،۱۱۱ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪٥۷ ...................................(AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۳۸ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۱۲ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪۱۰۷ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۱۳ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ‪۱۳ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪٦۰ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺹ‬ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪٥۷ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺣﺙ ‪٦۷ ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٥۰ ................................................ AE‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۸۲ ،۲ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۳۷ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۹۳ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۷۰ .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤۷ ......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪۹۹ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ‪۱۰۰ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪۱۰۰ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤۷ ........................‬‬ ‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤٦ .....................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤٥ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٤٥ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٤٤ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۷٥ ،٥۲ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪٥٦ ....................................................AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ‪۷۳ .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱۰٥ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۷٦ ،٤۰ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷٤ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ‪٥۳ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪٥۳ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۲٥ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺙ‬ ‫ﺛﻠﺞ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٤۳ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻫﺩﻑ‪۹۰ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‪۸۸ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪۸۸ ........................................‬‬ ‫‪۱٤۰‬‬ ‫ﺥ‬ ‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻫﺩﻑ‪۸۲ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪۸٤ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۸۳ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‪٦۱ ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‪٥۰ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٥۱ ..............................................AE‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۰ ..............................................FE‬‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪۱۲٥ .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٤٤ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪۱۱۲ ،۱۱۰ .................................AC‬‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪٥۱ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻁﻭﻟﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪٤۳ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪٦۹ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪٦۸ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪۸۹ ..............................................MAC‬‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱۳٥ ،۱۳۱ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۲۷ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺭﺹ ‪۲ ..... DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٥۱ .................................................... AE‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٥۸ .................................................... AF‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۰ .................................................... FE‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪٥۷ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬ ‫‪٥٤ ............................................. Macro‬‬ ‫ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪٥٥ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ‪۹۲ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ‪۹۲ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۹٤ ،۸٥ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﻫـ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪۸٥ ..............................CameraWindow‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻫﺩﻑ‪۸٥ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪۸٦ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ‪۸٦ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٥۲ ............................................... ISO‬‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪۱۱۱ .......................... (AV‬‬ ‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪۲۰ ،۲ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪۱۱۲ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۱۰ ،۲ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۱۱۱ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ )ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ( ‪۳۹ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺵ‬ ‫ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ( ‪٥٥ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱٤ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪Smart Auto‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪۱٤۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ®‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻭ™‪ WPA‬ﻭ™‪ WPA2‬ﻭ™‪ Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬ ‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪MPEG-4‬‬ ‫‪This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard‬‬ ‫‪and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding‬‬ ‫‪MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and‬‬ ‫‪non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T‬‬ ‫‪patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.‬‬ ‫‪No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻁﺑﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

Canon PowerShot A3500 IS User guide

Related manuals

Canon

PowerShot S110

Canon

PowerShot D30

Canon

PowerShot N100

Canon

PowerShot A2500

Canon

PowerShot N100

Canon

PowerShot SX412 IS

LG

LGM250E-Titan

Canon

PowerShot SX60 HS

LG

LGM250E-Titan

Canon

PowerShot SX432 IS

Canon

PowerShot SX610 HS

Canon

PowerShot SX710 HS